1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
131+ Garage Configurations In Stock | Free Install on All Tubular Steel Orders

Metal Garages & Steel Garage Kits For Sale

Fully enclosed prefabricated steel garages with free delivery and professional installation in all 48 contiguous states. Standard, triple-wide and lean-to configurations. 12 or 14 gauge galvanized frames with a 20-year rust-through warranty.

$6,775
Starting Price
48
States Served
20yr
12-GA Warranty
$0
Install Fee
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1721–1760 of 2342 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Tan metal shed with open front loafing shelter design on an autumn pasture with board fencing

100×60 Livestock Barn

6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×60 Livestock Barn | Steel and Stud, From $110,450

12

100×60 Livestock Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$125,900$110,450SAVE $15,450
or $2301/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×60Livestock Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×60 Livestock Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 100×60 livestock barn fits 100-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Looking for a 100×60 livestock barn? At 6000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm.

You’re viewing:Livestock Barn·Size100×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$110,450$125,900Save $15,450
or as low as $2301/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×60
100×60
this size
$110,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Ridge Vent
  • Open Gables
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X60-LIVESTOCK-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

100 feet wide × 60 feet long. Our 100×60 livestock barn fits 100-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Livestock areaCENTER ALLEYFeed / Storage100′ × 60′ · 6,000 sq ft · livestock-barn layout

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Looking for a 100×60 livestock barn? At 6000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

💡 Pro tip:40-50 Head Capacity.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×60 Livestock Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock Barn spec sheet.

Width100′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock barn
Everyday livestock barn
6,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock barn + seasonal storage
livestock barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×60 Livestock Barn, what makes it different.

6,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2301/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×60 livestock barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2301/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×60?

6,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 60′ footprint with 6,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $48,000–$72,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×60 Livestock Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×60 Livestock Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Livestock Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$27,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×60

Commercial Warehouse

100×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$111,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×60

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×60 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$110,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×60

Barndominium

100×60 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$109,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×60

Fabrication Shop

100×60 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$112,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×60

Horse Riding Arena

100×60 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$110,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×60

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×60 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$111,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×60

RV & Boat Storage

100×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$109,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×60

Self-Storage Facility

100×60 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$111,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×60

Church & Event Hall

100×60 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$111,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🎯 100×60

Indoor Sports Facility

100×60 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$109,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×60

Cold Storage Building

100×60 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$112,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×60 livestock barn cost?

A 100×60 livestock barn from Steel and Stud starts at $110,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2301/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×60 livestock barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud livestock barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×60 livestock barn?

Almost always for 6,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×60 livestock barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×60 livestock barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×60 livestock barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2301/month on a 100×60 livestock barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×60 livestock barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×60 livestock barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×60 livestock barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$110,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed with open front loafing shelter design on an autumn pasture with board fencing

100×60 Livestock Barn

6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$110,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building sports facility with glass entry and parked cars

100×60 Indoor Sports Facility

6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×60 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud, From $109,800

12

100×60 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$125,150$109,800SAVE $15,350
or $2288/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×60Indoor Sports Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×60 Indoor Sports Facility, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 100×60 indoor sports facility fits 100-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Youth sports clubs and training gyms fit batting cages, pitching tunnels.

You’re viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size100×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$109,800$125,150Save $15,350
or as low as $2288/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×60
100×60
this size
$109,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 20 ft Eave
  • Clear-Span
  • Insulated Package
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X60-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-arena layout.

100 feet wide × 60 feet long. Our 100×60 indoor sports facility fits 100-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Court / FieldSideline / BenchEquipment storage100′ × 60′ · 6,000 sq ft · open-arena layout

Court / Field · Sideline / Bench · Equipment storage

Court / Field at the front, sideline / bench in the middle, equipment storage at the rear. Youth sports clubs and training gyms fit batting cages, pitching tunnels, or a single basketball half-court plus training space into a 100×60.

💡 Pro tip:3 Cages End-to-End.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×60 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
6,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×60 Indoor Sports Facility, what makes it different.

6,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2288/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×60 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2288/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×60?

6,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 60′ footprint with 6,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $48,000–$72,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×60 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×60 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$27,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×60

Commercial Warehouse

100×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$111,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×60

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×60 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$110,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×60

Barndominium

100×60 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$109,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×60

Fabrication Shop

100×60 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$112,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×60

Horse Riding Arena

100×60 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$110,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×60

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×60 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$111,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×60

RV & Boat Storage

100×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$109,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×60

Self-Storage Facility

100×60 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$111,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×60

Church & Event Hall

100×60 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$111,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×60

Livestock Barn

100×60 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$110,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🏭 100×60

Cold Storage Building

100×60 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$112,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×60 indoor sports facility cost?

A 100×60 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $109,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2288/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×60 indoor sports facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×60 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 6,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×60 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×60 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×60 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2288/month on a 100×60 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×60 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×60 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×60 indoor sports facility for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor sports facility to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$109,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building sports facility with glass entry and parked cars

100×60 Indoor Sports Facility

6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$109,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building with lit loading docks and trucks at dawn

100×60 Cold Storage Building

6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×60 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $112,050

12

100×60 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$127,750$112,050SAVE $15,700
or $2334/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×60Cold Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×60 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×60 delivers 6000 sq ft of heavy-duty cold storage building space. Produce packers, meat processors, and beverage distributors use the 100×60 as a refrigerated shell with insulated metal panels. 4,6000 sq ft holds.

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$112,050$127,750Save $15,700
or as low as $2334/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×60
100×60
this size
$112,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Ready
  • Framed Dock Openings
  • Heavy Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X60-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 60 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. 100×60 delivers 6000 sq ft of heavy-duty cold storage building space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 60′ · 6,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~120 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Produce packers, meat processors, and beverage distributors use the 100×60 as a refrigerated shell with insulated metal panels.

💡 Pro tip:200 Pallet Capacity. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×60 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
6,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×60 Cold Storage Building, what makes it different.

6,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2334/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×60 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2334/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×60?

6,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 60′ footprint with 6,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $48,000–$72,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×60 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×60 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$27,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×60

Commercial Warehouse

100×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$111,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×60

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×60 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$110,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×60

Barndominium

100×60 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$109,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×60

Fabrication Shop

100×60 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$112,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×60

Horse Riding Arena

100×60 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$110,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×60

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×60 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$111,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×60

RV & Boat Storage

100×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$109,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×60

Self-Storage Facility

100×60 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$111,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×60

Church & Event Hall

100×60 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$111,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×60

Livestock Barn

100×60 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$110,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×60

Indoor Sports Facility

100×60 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$109,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×60 cold storage building cost?

A 100×60 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $112,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2334/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×60 cold storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×60 cold storage building?

Almost always for 6,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×60 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×60 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×60 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2334/month on a 100×60 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×60 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×60 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×60 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×60 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$112,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building with lit loading docks and trucks at dawn

100×60 Cold Storage Building

6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$112,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure warehouse at dawn with dock doors, semi trailers, and wet pavement

100×70 Distribution Center

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×70 Distribution Center | Steel and Stud, From $130,000

12

100×70 Distribution Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$148,200$130,000SAVE $18,200
or $2708/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×70Distribution Center

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×70 Distribution Center, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Fleet operators spec a 100×70 distribution center kit with two dock-high roll-ups and one drive-in door. The 7,000 sq ft floor holds 80+ pallet positions plus a 600 sq ft office mezzanine. ASCE 7-22 wind/snow.

You’re viewing:Distribution Center·Size100×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$130,000$148,200Save $18,200
or as low as $2708/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×70
100×70
this size
$130,000
100×80
longer
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IBC Certified
  • Mezzanine
  • Dual Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X70-DISTRIBUTION-CENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 70 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Fleet operators spec a 100×70 distribution center kit with two dock-high roll-ups and one drive-in door.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS100′ × 70′ · 7,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~140 pallet positions, full forklift ops. The 7,000 sq ft floor holds 80+ pallet positions plus a 600 sq ft office mezzanine.

💡 Pro tip:80+ Pallet Positions. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×70 Distribution Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Center spec sheet.

Width100′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space7,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Center.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution center
Everyday distribution center
7,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution center + seasonal storage
distribution center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×70 Distribution Center, what makes it different.

7,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2708/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×70 distribution center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2708/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×70?

7,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 70′ footprint with 7,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $56,000–$84,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×70 Distribution Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×70 Distribution Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$31,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Center also viewed:

🏭 100×70

Warehouse Steel Building

100×70 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×70

Manufacturing Facility

100×70 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×70

Commercial Workshop

100×70 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏭 100×70

Aircraft Hangar

100×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×70

Agricultural Metal Building

100×70 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏢 100×70

Cold Storage Building

100×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×70

Riding Arena

100×70 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×70

Fabrication Shop

100×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×70

Self-Storage Facility

100×70 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×70

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×70 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×70

Indoor Sports Facility

100×70 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×70 distribution center cost?

A 100×70 distribution center from Steel and Stud starts at $130,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2708/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×70 distribution center price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×70 distribution center?

Almost always for 7,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×70 distribution center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×70 distribution center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×70 distribution center without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2708/month on a 100×70 distribution center.

What warranty comes with the 100×70 distribution center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×70 distribution center in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×70 distribution center meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$130,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure warehouse at dawn with dock doors, semi trailers, and wet pavement

100×70 Distribution Center

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$130,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black steel building warehouse with loading docks, box truck, and stacked pallets

100×70 Warehouse Steel Building

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×70 Warehouse Steel Building | Steel and Stud, From $130,400

12

100×70 Warehouse Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$148,650$130,400SAVE $18,250
or $2717/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×70Warehouse Steel Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×70 Warehouse Steel Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 100×70 warehouse steel building fits 100-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. At 9,7000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on.

You’re viewing:Warehouse Steel Building·Size100×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$130,400$148,650Save $18,250
or as low as $2717/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×70
100×70
this size
$130,400
100×80
longer
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,000 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 1,400 Pallet Positions
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X70-WAREHOUSE-STEEL-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 70 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Our 100×70 warehouse steel building fits 100-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 70′ · 7,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~140 pallet positions, full forklift ops. At 9,7000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on selective racking with room for a small office build-out.

💡 Pro tip:1,400 Pallet Positions. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×70 Warehouse Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Steel Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space7,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse steel building
Everyday warehouse steel building
7,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse steel building + seasonal storage
warehouse steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×70 Warehouse Steel Building, what makes it different.

7,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2717/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×70 warehouse steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2717/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×70?

7,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 70′ footprint with 7,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $56,000–$84,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×70 Warehouse Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×70 Warehouse Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$31,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Steel Building also viewed:

🏢 100×70

Distribution Center

100×70 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×70

Manufacturing Facility

100×70 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×70

Commercial Workshop

100×70 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏭 100×70

Aircraft Hangar

100×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×70

Agricultural Metal Building

100×70 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏢 100×70

Cold Storage Building

100×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×70

Riding Arena

100×70 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×70

Fabrication Shop

100×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×70

Self-Storage Facility

100×70 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×70

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×70 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×70

Indoor Sports Facility

100×70 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×70 warehouse steel building cost?

A 100×70 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $130,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2717/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×70 warehouse steel building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud warehouse steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×70 warehouse steel building?

Almost always for 7,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×70 warehouse steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×70 warehouse steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×70 warehouse steel building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2717/month on a 100×70 warehouse steel building.

What warranty comes with the 100×70 warehouse steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×70 warehouse steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×70 warehouse steel building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×70 warehouse steel building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$130,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black steel building warehouse with loading docks, box truck, and stacked pallets

100×70 Warehouse Steel Building

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$130,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Khaki prefab metal building with white roll-up door and bollards in a desert industrial yard

100×70 Manufacturing Facility

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×70 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $130,400

12

100×70 Manufacturing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$148,650$130,400SAVE $18,250
or $2717/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×70Manufacturing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×70 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 100×70 manufacturing facility? At 7000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Manufacturers configure the 100×70 PEMB for a full production line including CNC cells.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Facility·Size100×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$130,400$148,650Save $18,250
or as low as $2717/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×70
100×70
this size
$130,400
100×80
longer
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Crane-Ready Framing
  • 26 GA Panels
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X70-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.

100 feet wide × 70 feet long. Looking for a 100×70 manufacturing facility? At 7000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

Weld / fab bayMATERIAL STORAGEOffice / break100′ × 70′ · 7,000 sq ft · fabrication-shop layout

Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break

Weld / fab bay at the front, material storage in the middle, office / break at the rear. Manufacturers configure the 100×70 PEMB for a full production line including CNC cells, finishing bays, and QC stations, with no interior column to re-route conveyors around.

💡 Pro tip:Stamped Drawings.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×70 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space7,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing facility
Everyday manufacturing facility
7,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing facility + seasonal storage
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×70 Manufacturing Facility, what makes it different.

7,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2717/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×70 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2717/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×70?

7,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 70′ footprint with 7,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $56,000–$84,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×70 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×70 Manufacturing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$31,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×70

Distribution Center

100×70 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×70

Warehouse Steel Building

100×70 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏢 100×70

Commercial Workshop

100×70 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏭 100×70

Aircraft Hangar

100×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×70

Agricultural Metal Building

100×70 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏢 100×70

Cold Storage Building

100×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×70

Riding Arena

100×70 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×70

Fabrication Shop

100×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×70

Self-Storage Facility

100×70 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×70

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×70 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×70

Indoor Sports Facility

100×70 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×70 manufacturing facility cost?

A 100×70 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $130,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2717/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×70 manufacturing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×70 manufacturing facility?

Almost always for 7,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×70 manufacturing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×70 manufacturing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×70 manufacturing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2717/month on a 100×70 manufacturing facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×70 manufacturing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×70 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×70 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×70 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$130,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Khaki prefab metal building with white roll-up door and bollards in a desert industrial yard

100×70 Manufacturing Facility

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$130,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Olive commercial metal building with glass office storefront, awning and two roll-up bays

100×70 Commercial Workshop

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×70 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $130,000

12

100×70 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$148,200$130,000SAVE $18,200
or $2708/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×70Commercial Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×70 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 100×70 commercial workshop? At 7000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Fabricators and auto-body shops spec the 100×70 commercial workshop to house six 100×70 bays.

You’re viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$130,000$148,200Save $18,200
or as low as $2708/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×70
100×70
this size
$130,000
100×80
longer
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 6-Bay Layout
  • 3x Roll-Ups
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X70-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

100 feet wide × 70 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Looking for a 100×70 commercial workshop? At 7000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage100′ × 70′ · 7,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Fabricators and auto-body shops spec the 100×70 commercial workshop to house six 100×70 bays along one wall with a shared 40-ft paint booth on the other.

💡 Pro tip:Paint-Booth Ready. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×70 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space7,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
7,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×70 Commercial Workshop, what makes it different.

7,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2708/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×70 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2708/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×70?

7,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 70′ footprint with 7,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $56,000–$84,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×70 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×70 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$31,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×70

Distribution Center

100×70 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×70

Warehouse Steel Building

100×70 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×70

Manufacturing Facility

100×70 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏭 100×70

Aircraft Hangar

100×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×70

Agricultural Metal Building

100×70 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏢 100×70

Cold Storage Building

100×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×70

Riding Arena

100×70 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×70

Fabrication Shop

100×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×70

Self-Storage Facility

100×70 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×70

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×70 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×70

Indoor Sports Facility

100×70 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×70 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×70 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $130,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2708/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×70 commercial workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×70 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 7,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×70 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×70 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×70 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2708/month on a 100×70 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×70 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×70 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×70 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$130,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Olive commercial metal building with glass office storefront, awning and two roll-up bays

100×70 Commercial Workshop

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$130,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Fulfillment center interior of a commercial metal building with conveyor line, forklift, and racking

100×70 Aircraft Hangar

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×70 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud, From $130,400

12

100×70 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$148,650$130,400SAVE $18,250
or $2717/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×70Aircraft Hangar

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×70 Aircraft Hangar, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Owners of single-engine and light-twin aircraft order the 100×70 metal building hangar with a 60′ hydraulic bifold door across the gable. The 70-ft depth holds a Cessna 414 plus workbench and parts storage. Stamped.

You’re viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$130,400$148,650Save $18,250
or as low as $2717/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×70
100×70
this size
$130,400
100×80
longer
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Bifold Door Ready
  • 14 GA Frame
  • IBC Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X70-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 70 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. Owners of single-engine and light-twin aircraft order the 100×70 metal building hangar with a 60′ hydraulic bifold door across the gable.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 70′ · 7,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. The 70-ft depth holds a Cessna 414 plus workbench and parts storage.

💡 Pro tip:60′ Door Span. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×70 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space7,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
7,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×70 Aircraft Hangar, what makes it different.

7,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2717/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×70 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2717/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×70?

7,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 70′ footprint with 7,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $56,000–$84,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×70 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×70 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$31,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×70

Distribution Center

100×70 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×70

Warehouse Steel Building

100×70 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×70

Manufacturing Facility

100×70 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×70

Commercial Workshop

100×70 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×70

Agricultural Metal Building

100×70 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏢 100×70

Cold Storage Building

100×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×70

Riding Arena

100×70 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×70

Fabrication Shop

100×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×70

Self-Storage Facility

100×70 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×70

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×70 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×70

Indoor Sports Facility

100×70 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×70 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×70 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $130,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2717/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×70 aircraft hangar price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×70 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 7,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×70 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×70 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×70 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2717/month on a 100×70 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×70 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×70 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×70 aircraft hangar handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×70 aircraft hangar ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$130,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Fulfillment center interior of a commercial metal building with conveyor line, forklift, and racking

100×70 Aircraft Hangar

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$130,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal shed with single slope roof and open bays holding a tractor, UTV and boat

100×70 Agricultural Metal Building

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×70 Agricultural Metal Building | Steel and Stud, From $128,800

12

100×70 Agricultural Metal Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$146,850$128,800SAVE $18,050
or $2683/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×70Agricultural Metal Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×70 Agricultural Metal Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

100×70 delivers 7000 sq ft of rugged agricultural metal building space. Agricultural-industrial operators run a 100×70 as a hay barn, equipment shed, or cattle handling facility. At 9,7000 sq ft you store roughly 800.

You’re viewing:Agricultural Metal Building·Size100×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$128,800$146,850Save $18,050
or as low as $2683/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×70
100×70
this size
$128,800
100×80
longer
$147,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open-Side Option
  • 800 Bale Capacity
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X70-AGRICULTURAL-METBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your agricultural metal building layout.

100 feet wide × 70 feet long. 100×70 delivers 7000 sq ft of rugged agricultural metal building space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 70′ · 7,000 sq ft · agricultural metal building layout

Agricultural Metal Building layout.

100×70 delivers 7000 sq ft of rugged agricultural metal building space. Agricultural-industrial operators run a 100×70 as a hay barn, equipment shed, or cattle handling facility. At 9,7000 sq ft you store roughly 800 large round bales stacked three high or park a combine, two tractors, and a sprayer with maintenance access. Open-side or partially enclosed configurations dominate this use.

💡 Pro tip:800 Bale Capacity.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×70 Agricultural Metal Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Metal Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Metal Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space7,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Metal Building.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural metal building
Everyday agricultural metal building
7,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural metal building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural metal building + seasonal storage
agricultural metal building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×70 Agricultural Metal Building, what makes it different.

7,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2683/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×70 agricultural metal building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2683/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×70?

7,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 70′ footprint with 7,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $56,000–$84,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Metal Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×70 Agricultural Metal Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×70 Agricultural Metal Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Metal Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$31,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Metal Building also viewed:

🏢 100×70

Distribution Center

100×70 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×70

Warehouse Steel Building

100×70 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×70

Manufacturing Facility

100×70 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×70

Commercial Workshop

100×70 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏭 100×70

Aircraft Hangar

100×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏢 100×70

Cold Storage Building

100×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×70

Riding Arena

100×70 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×70

Fabrication Shop

100×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×70

Self-Storage Facility

100×70 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×70

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×70 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×70

Indoor Sports Facility

100×70 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Metal Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×70 agricultural metal building cost?

A 100×70 agricultural metal building from Steel and Stud starts at $128,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2683/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×70 agricultural metal building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud agricultural metal building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×70 agricultural metal building?

Almost always for 7,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural metal building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×70 agricultural metal building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×70 agricultural metal building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×70 agricultural metal building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2683/month on a 100×70 agricultural metal building.

What warranty comes with the 100×70 agricultural metal building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×70 agricultural metal building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×70 agricultural metal building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Metal Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$128,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal shed with single slope roof and open bays holding a tractor, UTV and boat

100×70 Agricultural Metal Building

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$128,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Bright metal building distribution warehouse interior with forklift, conveyor line, and racking

100×70 Cold Storage Building

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×70 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $130,000

12

100×70 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$148,200$130,000SAVE $18,200
or $2708/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×70Cold Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×70 Cold Storage Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial buyers run cold storage out of a 100×70 insulated steel kit using 4-inch insulated metal panels and an R-19 ceiling system. The 7,000 sq ft footprint holds two refrigerated zones plus a loading vestibule.

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$130,000$148,200Save $18,200
or as low as $2708/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×70
100×70
this size
$130,000
100×80
longer
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Walls
  • R-19 Ceiling
  • IECC Compliant
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X70-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 70 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Commercial buyers run cold storage out of a 100×70 insulated steel kit using 4-inch insulated metal panels and an R-19 ceiling system.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 70′ · 7,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~140 pallet positions, full forklift ops. The 7,000 sq ft footprint holds two refrigerated zones plus a loading vestibule.

💡 Pro tip:Dual-Zone Capable. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×70 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space7,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
7,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×70 Cold Storage Building, what makes it different.

7,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2708/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×70 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2708/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×70?

7,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 70′ footprint with 7,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $56,000–$84,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×70 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×70 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$31,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×70

Distribution Center

100×70 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×70

Warehouse Steel Building

100×70 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×70

Manufacturing Facility

100×70 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×70

Commercial Workshop

100×70 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏭 100×70

Aircraft Hangar

100×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×70

Agricultural Metal Building

100×70 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🌾 100×70

Riding Arena

100×70 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×70

Fabrication Shop

100×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×70

Self-Storage Facility

100×70 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×70

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×70 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×70

Indoor Sports Facility

100×70 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×70 cold storage building cost?

A 100×70 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $130,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2708/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×70 cold storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×70 cold storage building?

Almost always for 7,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×70 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×70 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×70 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2708/month on a 100×70 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×70 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×70 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×70 cold storage building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$130,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Bright metal building distribution warehouse interior with forklift, conveyor line, and racking

100×70 Cold Storage Building

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$130,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open sliding doors, center aisle stalls, and fenced drive

100×70 Riding Arena

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×70 Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $128,800

12

100×70 Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$146,850$128,800SAVE $18,050
or $2683/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×70Riding Arena

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×70 Riding Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

100×70 delivers 7000 sq ft of rugged riding arena space. Sliding barn doors at both gable ends let trainers run a full figure-eight, and 16-ft eaves keep dust-down sprinklers out of a rider’s hat.

You’re viewing:Riding Arena·Size100×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$128,800$146,850Save $18,050
or as low as $2683/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×70
100×70
this size
$128,800
100×80
longer
$147,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 16′ Eave Height
  • 2x Sliding Barn Doors
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X70-RIDING-ARENABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your riding arena layout.

100 feet wide × 70 feet long. 100×70 delivers 7000 sq ft of rugged riding arena space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 70′ · 7,000 sq ft · riding arena layout

Riding Arena layout.

100×70 delivers 7000 sq ft of rugged riding arena space. Sliding barn doors at both gable ends let trainers run a full figure-eight, and 16-ft eaves keep dust-down sprinklers out of a rider’s hat.

💡 Pro tip:Wind 115 MPH.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×70 Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space7,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday riding arena
Everyday riding arena
7,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWriding arena + seasonal storage
riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×70 Riding Arena, what makes it different.

7,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2683/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×70 riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2683/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×70?

7,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 70′ footprint with 7,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $56,000–$84,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×70 Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×70 Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$31,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×70

Distribution Center

100×70 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×70

Warehouse Steel Building

100×70 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×70

Manufacturing Facility

100×70 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×70

Commercial Workshop

100×70 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏭 100×70

Aircraft Hangar

100×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×70

Agricultural Metal Building

100×70 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏢 100×70

Cold Storage Building

100×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏭 100×70

Fabrication Shop

100×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×70

Self-Storage Facility

100×70 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×70

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×70 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×70

Indoor Sports Facility

100×70 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×70 riding arena cost?

A 100×70 riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $128,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2683/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×70 riding arena price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×70 riding arena?

Almost always for 7,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×70 riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×70 riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×70 riding arena without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2683/month on a 100×70 riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×70 riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×70 riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×70 riding arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$128,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open sliding doors, center aisle stalls, and fenced drive

100×70 Riding Arena

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$128,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building fabrication shop with glass roll-up doors and skid steer carrying steel

100×70 Fabrication Shop

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×70 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $130,400

12

100×70 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$148,650$130,400SAVE $18,250
or $2717/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×70Fabrication Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×70 Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Fabricators order the 100×70 metal workshop with 18-20′ eaves to clear overhead crane rails. The clear-span 100-ft width runs a single 5-ton bridge crane the full length. Reinforced framing carries the rail load, and.

You’re viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size100×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$130,400$148,650Save $18,250
or as low as $2717/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×70
100×40
smaller
$75,450
100×70
this size
$130,400
100×80
longer
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Crane-Ready Frame
  • 12 GA
  • 20′ Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X70-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

100 feet wide × 70 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Fabricators order the 100×70 metal workshop with 18-20′ eaves to clear overhead crane rails.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage100′ × 70′ · 7,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. The clear-span 100-ft width runs a single 5-ton bridge crane the full length.

💡 Pro tip:5-Ton Crane Capable. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×70 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space7,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
7,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×70 Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.

7,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2717/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×70 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2717/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×70?

7,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 70′ footprint with 7,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $56,000–$84,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×70 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×70 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$31,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 100×70

Distribution Center

100×70 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×70

Warehouse Steel Building

100×70 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×70

Manufacturing Facility

100×70 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×70

Commercial Workshop

100×70 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏭 100×70

Aircraft Hangar

100×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×70

Agricultural Metal Building

100×70 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏢 100×70

Cold Storage Building

100×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×70

Riding Arena

100×70 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏢 100×70

Self-Storage Facility

100×70 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×70

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×70 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×70

Indoor Sports Facility

100×70 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×70 fabrication shop cost?

A 100×70 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $130,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2717/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×70 fabrication shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×70 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 7,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×70 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×70 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×70 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2717/month on a 100×70 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 100×70 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×70 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×70 fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×70 fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$130,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building fabrication shop with glass roll-up doors and skid steer carrying steel

100×70 Fabrication Shop

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$130,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit self storage facility with blue roll-up doors and black roof

100×70 Self-Storage Facility

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×70 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $130,000

12

100×70 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$148,200$130,000SAVE $18,200
or $2708/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×70Self-Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×70 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 100×70 self-storage facility? At 7000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Our 100×70 self-storage facility fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a.

You’re viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$130,000$148,200Save $18,200
or as low as $2708/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×70
100×70
this size
$130,000
100×80
longer
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Steel Partitions
  • 60+ Units
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X70-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your self-storage layout.

100 feet wide × 70 feet long. Looking for a 100×70 self-storage facility? At 7000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit row AUnit row BHallway / Office100′ × 70′ · 7,000 sq ft · self-storage layout

Unit row A · Unit row B · Hallway / Office

Unit row A at the front, unit row b in the middle, hallway / office at the rear. Our 100×70 self-storage facility fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

💡 Pro tip:60+ Units.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×70 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space7,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
7,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×70 Self-Storage Facility, what makes it different.

7,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2708/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×70 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2708/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×70?

7,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 70′ footprint with 7,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $56,000–$84,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×70 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×70 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$31,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×70

Distribution Center

100×70 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×70

Warehouse Steel Building

100×70 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×70

Manufacturing Facility

100×70 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×70

Commercial Workshop

100×70 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏭 100×70

Aircraft Hangar

100×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×70

Agricultural Metal Building

100×70 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏢 100×70

Cold Storage Building

100×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×70

Riding Arena

100×70 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×70

Fabrication Shop

100×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏭 100×70

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×70 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×70

Indoor Sports Facility

100×70 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×70 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×70 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $130,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2708/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×70 self-storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×70 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 7,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×70 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×70 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×70 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2708/month on a 100×70 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×70 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×70 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×70 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$130,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit self storage facility with blue roll-up doors and black roof

100×70 Self-Storage Facility

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$130,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal workshop interior with white fleet vans and technicians servicing an engine bay

100×70 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×70 Truck and Fleet Maintenance | Steel and Stud, From $130,400

12

100×70 Truck and Fleet Maintenance
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$148,650$130,400SAVE $18,250
or $2717/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×70Truck and Fleet Maintenance

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×70 Truck and Fleet Maintenance, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance packs 7000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Fleet operators spec a 100×70 with three 100×70 roll-ups on the long.

You’re viewing:Truck and Fleet Maintenance·Size100×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$130,400$148,650Save $18,250
or as low as $2717/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×70
100×70
this size
$130,400
100×80
longer
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14×14 Roll-Ups
  • Pull-Through
  • Class 8 Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X70-TRUCK-FLEET-MAINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

100 feet wide × 70 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance packs 7000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

10 vehicle baysWORKSHOP AREAStorage + lift bay100′ × 70′ · 7,000 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

10 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

10 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 10 vehicles + full hobby shop. Fleet operators spec a 100×70 with three 100×70 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors.

💡 Pro tip:Class 8 Clearance. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×70 Truck and Fleet Maintenance in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck and Fleet Maintenance spec sheet.

Width100′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space7,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

DAILY USEEveryday truck and fleet maintenance
Everyday truck and fleet maintenance
7,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck and fleet maintenance.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
truck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×70 Truck and Fleet Maintenance, what makes it different.

7,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2717/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2717/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×70?

7,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 70′ footprint with 7,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $56,000–$84,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck and Fleet Maintenance shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×70 Truck and Fleet Maintenance buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×70 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck and Fleet Maintenance · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$31,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck and Fleet Maintenance also viewed:

🏢 100×70

Distribution Center

100×70 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×70

Warehouse Steel Building

100×70 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×70

Manufacturing Facility

100×70 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×70

Commercial Workshop

100×70 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏭 100×70

Aircraft Hangar

100×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×70

Agricultural Metal Building

100×70 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏢 100×70

Cold Storage Building

100×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×70

Riding Arena

100×70 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×70

Fabrication Shop

100×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×70

Self-Storage Facility

100×70 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🎯 100×70

Indoor Sports Facility

100×70 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck and Fleet Maintenance questions, answered.

How much does a 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance cost?

A 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud starts at $130,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2717/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance?

Almost always for 7,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2717/month on a 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance.

What warranty comes with the 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×70 truck and fleet maintenance ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck and Fleet Maintenance quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$130,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal workshop interior with white fleet vans and technicians servicing an engine bay

100×70 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$130,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel building garage with two black doors, sports car, and ATV parked outside

100×70 Indoor Sports Facility

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×70 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud, From $128,150

12

100×70 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$146,100$128,150SAVE $17,950
or $2670/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×70Indoor Sports Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×70 Indoor Sports Facility, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 100×70 indoor sports facility packs 7000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Youth sports developers drop a regulation high-school basketball court (84’x50′).

You’re viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size100×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$128,150$146,100Save $17,950
or as low as $2670/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×70
100×70
this size
$128,150
100×80
longer
$146,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 18′ Eave Height
  • Vertical Roof
  • R-13 Acoustic
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X70-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-arena layout.

100 feet wide × 70 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 100×70 indoor sports facility packs 7000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Court / FieldSideline / BenchEquipment storage100′ × 70′ · 7,000 sq ft · open-arena layout

Court / Field · Sideline / Bench · Equipment storage

Court / Field at the front, sideline / bench in the middle, equipment storage at the rear. Youth sports developers drop a regulation high-school basketball court (84’x50′) inside a 100×70 with bleacher room on both baselines.

💡 Pro tip:Clear-Span.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×70 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space7,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
7,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×70 Indoor Sports Facility, what makes it different.

7,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2670/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×70 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2670/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×70?

7,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 70′ footprint with 7,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $56,000–$84,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×70 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×70 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$31,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×70

Distribution Center

100×70 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×70

Warehouse Steel Building

100×70 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×70

Manufacturing Facility

100×70 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×70

Commercial Workshop

100×70 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏭 100×70

Aircraft Hangar

100×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×70

Agricultural Metal Building

100×70 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏢 100×70

Cold Storage Building

100×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×70

Riding Arena

100×70 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$128,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×70

Fabrication Shop

100×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×70

Self-Storage Facility

100×70 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×70

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×70 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$130,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×70 indoor sports facility cost?

A 100×70 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $128,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2670/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×70 indoor sports facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×70 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 7,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×70 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×70 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×70 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2670/month on a 100×70 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×70 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×70 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×70 indoor sports facility for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor sports facility to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$128,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel building garage with two black doors, sports car, and ATV parked outside

100×70 Indoor Sports Facility

7,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×70 steel building delivers 7,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$128,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown metal carport RV cover sheltering a fifth wheel camper at sunset among shade trees

10×120 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×120 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor | Steel and Stud, From $17,700

12

10×120 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,200$17,700SAVE $2,500
or $369/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×120RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×120 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor, built for hobby and recreational use.

10×120 delivers 1200 sq ft of hobby-ready rv & travel trailer storage corridor space. RV owners with Class A motorhomes or fifth-wheels park three full-length rigs end-to-end under one continuous roof. The 100-foot run.

You’re viewing:RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor·Size10×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,700$20,200Save $2,500
or as low as $369/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×120
10×100
smaller
$14,750
10×120
this size
$17,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,200 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Drive-Through Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X120-RV-TRAVEL-TRAILEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

10 feet wide × 120 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. 10×120 delivers 1200 sq ft of hobby-ready rv & travel trailer storage corridor space.

RV bayDaily driverHookup / pre-wire10′ × 120′ · 1,200 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 45ft + 1 daily driver. RV owners with Class A motorhomes or fifth-wheels park three full-length rigs end-to-end under one continuous roof.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Doors. Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×120 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor spec sheet.

Width10′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor.

DAILY USEEveryday rv & travel trailer storage corridor
Everyday rv & travel trailer storage corridor
1,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & travel trailer storage corridor.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv & travel trailer storage corridor + seasonal storage
rv & travel trailer storage corridor + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×120 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor, what makes it different.

1,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$369/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $369/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×120?

1,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 120′ footprint with 1,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $9,600–$14,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×120 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×120 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,400+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor also viewed:

🌾 10×120

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×120

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×120 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×120

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×120 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×120

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×120

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×120

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×120

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×120 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×120

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×120 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×120

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×120

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×120 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×120

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×120 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor questions, answered.

How much does a 10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor cost?

A 10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor from Steel and Stud starts at $17,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $369/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv & travel trailer storage corridor ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor?

Almost always for 1,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv & travel trailer storage corridor different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $369/month on a 10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor.

What warranty comes with the 10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv & travel trailer storage corridor to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$17,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown metal carport RV cover sheltering a fifth wheel camper at sunset among shade trees

10×120 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel barn with white trim, cupola, and dutch door stall, paint horse grazing nearby

10×120 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×120 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed | Steel and Stud, From $18,350

12

10×120 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,900$18,350SAVE $2,550
or $382/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×120Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×120 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed? At 1200 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Hobby farmers stack round bales five-wide along the 100-foot wall and pull a tractor.

You’re viewing:Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed·Size10×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,350$20,900Save $2,550
or as low as $382/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×120
10×100
smaller
$15,400
10×120
this size
$18,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,200 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Sides
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X120-HAY-EQUIPMENT-RUBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

10 feet wide × 120 feet long. Looking for a 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed? At 1200 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Hay storageFEED ALLEYEquipment10′ × 120′ · 1,200 sq ft · hay-barn layout

Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment

Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. Hobby farmers stack round bales five-wide along the 100-foot wall and pull a tractor through the open gable.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×120 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed spec sheet.

Width10′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & equipment run-in shed
Everyday hay & equipment run-in shed
1,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & equipment run-in shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & equipment run-in shed + seasonal storage
hay & equipment run-in shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×120 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed, what makes it different.

1,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$382/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $382/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×120?

1,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 120′ footprint with 1,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $9,600–$14,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×120 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×120 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,400+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed also viewed:

🎯 10×120

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🏢 10×120

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×120 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×120

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×120 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×120

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×120

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×120

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×120

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×120 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×120

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×120 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×120

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×120

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×120 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×120

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×120 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed cost?

A 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed from Steel and Stud starts at $18,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $382/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & equipment run-in shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed?

Almost always for 1,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & equipment run-in shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $382/month on a 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed.

What warranty comes with the 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$18,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel barn with white trim, cupola, and dutch door stall, paint horse grazing nearby

10×120 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel garage interior with galvanized framing, white panels and open roll-up door view

10×120 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×120 Contractor Supply & Van Bay | Steel and Stud, From $19,550

12

10×120 Contractor Supply & Van Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$22,300$19,550SAVE $2,750
or $407/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×120Contractor Supply & Van Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×120 Contractor Supply & Van Bay, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 10×120 contractor supply & van bay packs 1200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Plumbers, electricians, and framers pull a service van straight into the.

You’re viewing:Contractor Supply & Van Bay·Size10×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,550$22,300Save $2,750
or as low as $407/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×120
10×100
smaller
$16,600
10×120
this size
$19,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,200 sq ft enclosed
  • Fully Enclosed
  • Van Pull-In
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X120-CONTRACTOR-SUPPLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your contractor-storage layout.

10 feet wide × 120 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 10×120 contractor supply & van bay packs 1200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Inventory racksLoading bayOffice / Desk10′ × 120′ · 1,200 sq ft · contractor-storage layout

Inventory racks · Loading bay · Office / Desk

Inventory racks at the front, loading bay in the middle, office / desk at the rear. Plumbers, electricians, and framers pull a service van straight into the end bay of the 10×120 and use the remaining 80 feet as a walk-in supply room for fittings, conduit, and fixtures.

💡 Pro tip:Van Pull-In.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×120 Contractor Supply & Van Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Supply & Van Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Supply & Van Bay spec sheet.

Width10′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Supply & Van Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor supply & van bay
Everyday contractor supply & van bay
1,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor supply & van bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor supply & van bay + seasonal storage
contractor supply & van bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×120 Contractor Supply & Van Bay, what makes it different.

1,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$407/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×120 contractor supply & van bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $407/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×120?

1,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 120′ footprint with 1,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $9,600–$14,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Supply & Van Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×120 Contractor Supply & Van Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×120 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Supply & Van Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,400+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Supply & Van Bay also viewed:

🎯 10×120

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×120

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏡 10×120

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×120 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×120

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×120

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×120

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×120

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×120 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×120

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×120 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×120

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×120

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×120 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×120

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×120 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Supply & Van Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 10×120 contractor supply & van bay cost?

A 10×120 contractor supply & van bay from Steel and Stud starts at $19,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $407/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×120 contractor supply & van bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor supply & van bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×120 contractor supply & van bay?

Almost always for 1,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor supply & van bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×120 contractor supply & van bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×120 contractor supply & van bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×120 contractor supply & van bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $407/month on a 10×120 contractor supply & van bay.

What warranty comes with the 10×120 contractor supply & van bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×120 contractor supply & van bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 10×120 contractor supply & van bay meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Supply & Van Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel garage interior with galvanized framing, white panels and open roll-up door view

10×120 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Copper-toned metal workshop with black wainscoting and roll-up door in autumn countryside

10×120 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×120 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench | Steel and Stud, From $17,700

12

10×120 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,200$17,700SAVE $2,500
or $369/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×120Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×120 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench packs 1200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Our 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to.

You’re viewing:Long Workshop & Hobby Bench·Size10×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,700$20,200Save $2,500
or as low as $369/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×120
10×100
smaller
$14,750
10×120
this size
$17,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,200 sq ft enclosed
  • A-Frame Roof
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X120-LONG-WORKSHOP-HOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

10 feet wide × 120 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench packs 1200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack10′ × 120′ · 1,200 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. Our 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

💡 Pro tip:R-19 Insulation. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×120 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Long Workshop & Hobby Bench.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench spec sheet.

Width10′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Long Workshop & Hobby Bench.

DAILY USEEveryday long workshop & hobby bench
Everyday long workshop & hobby bench
1,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a long workshop & hobby bench.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlong workshop & hobby bench + seasonal storage
long workshop & hobby bench + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×120 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench, what makes it different.

1,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$369/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $369/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×120?

1,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 120′ footprint with 1,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $9,600–$14,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Long Workshop & Hobby Bench shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×120 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×120 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Long Workshop & Hobby Bench · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,400+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Long Workshop & Hobby Bench also viewed:

🎯 10×120

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×120

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×120

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×120 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🎯 10×120

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×120

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×120

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×120

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×120 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×120

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×120 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×120

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×120

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×120 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×120

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×120 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench questions, answered.

How much does a 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench cost?

A 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench from Steel and Stud starts at $17,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $369/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud long workshop & hobby bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench?

Almost always for 1,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud long workshop & hobby bench different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $369/month on a 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench.

What warranty comes with the 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×120 long workshop & hobby bench typically adds $9,600–$14,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Long Workshop & Hobby Bench quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$17,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Copper-toned metal workshop with black wainscoting and roll-up door in autumn countryside

10×120 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building at sunset with a pontoon boat exiting the metal garage door lakeside

10×120 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×120 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud, From $17,700

12

10×120 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,200$17,700SAVE $2,500
or $369/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×120Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×120 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage packs 1200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Marina-adjacent property owners stage 2-3 bass boats, jet ski trailers.

You’re viewing:Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage·Size10×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,700$20,200Save $2,500
or as low as $369/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×120
10×100
smaller
$14,750
10×120
this size
$17,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,200 sq ft enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • Hurricane Cert
  • Roll-Up Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X120-SINGLE-LANE-BOATBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

10 feet wide × 120 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage packs 1200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Boat + trailerDaily driverOutboard / rinse10′ × 120′ · 1,200 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer · Daily driver · Outboard / rinse

Boat + trailer at the front, daily driver in the middle, outboard / rinse at the rear. Marina-adjacent property owners stage 2-3 bass boats, jet ski trailers, and a center-console end-to-end.

💡 Pro tip:Hurricane Cert.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×120 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday single-lane boat & trailer storage
Everyday single-lane boat & trailer storage
1,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-lane boat & trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-lane boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
single-lane boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×120 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage, what makes it different.

1,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$369/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $369/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×120?

1,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 120′ footprint with 1,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $9,600–$14,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×120 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×120 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,400+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage also viewed:

🎯 10×120

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×120

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×120

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×120 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×120

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×120 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🏭 10×120

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×120

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×120

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×120 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×120

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×120 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×120

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×120

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×120 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×120

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×120 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage cost?

A 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $17,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $369/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-lane boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage?

Almost always for 1,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-lane boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $369/month on a 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a single-lane boat & trailer storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$17,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building at sunset with a pontoon boat exiting the metal garage door lakeside

10×120 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage at sunset with open bay door, pickup truck, and dump trailer outside

10×120 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×120 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack | Steel and Stud, From $19,950

12

10×120 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$22,750$19,950SAVE $2,800
or $416/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×120Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×120 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack fits 10-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Steel fabricators, irrigation contractors, and pool builders rack.

You’re viewing:Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack·Size10×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,950$22,750Save $2,800
or as low as $416/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×120
10×100
smaller
$17,000
10×120
this size
$19,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,200 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Gables
  • Forklift Clearance
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X120-PIPE-REBAR-LONG-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your pipe, rebar & long-stock rack layout.

10 feet wide × 120 feet long. Our 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack fits 10-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 120′ · 1,200 sq ft · pipe, rebar & long-stock rack layout

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack layout.

Our 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack fits 10-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Steel fabricators, irrigation contractors, and pool builders rack 20-foot and 40-foot lengths inside cantilever stands along the 100-foot wall. Forklift access through both gables turns the building into a covered drive-through pull yard for long material.

💡 Pro tip:Forklift Clearance.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×120 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack spec sheet.

Width10′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack.

DAILY USEEveryday pipe, rebar & long-stock rack
Everyday pipe, rebar & long-stock rack
1,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pipe, rebar & long-stock rack.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpipe, rebar & long-stock rack + seasonal storage
pipe, rebar & long-stock rack + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×120 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack, what makes it different.

1,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$416/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $416/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×120?

1,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 120′ footprint with 1,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $9,600–$14,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×120 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×120 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,400+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack also viewed:

🎯 10×120

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×120

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×120

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×120 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×120

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×120 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×120

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🌾 10×120

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×120

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×120 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×120

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×120 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×120

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×120

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×120 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×120

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×120 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack questions, answered.

How much does a 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack cost?

A 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack from Steel and Stud starts at $19,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $416/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pipe, rebar & long-stock rack ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack?

Almost always for 1,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pipe, rebar & long-stock rack different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $416/month on a 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack.

What warranty comes with the 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage at sunset with open bay door, pickup truck, and dump trailer outside

10×120 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel barn with three dutch stall doors, horses looking out, and rooftop cupola

10×120 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×120 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow | Steel and Stud, From $18,350

12

10×120 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,900$18,350SAVE $2,550
or $382/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×120Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×120 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow, built for farm and ranch demands.

10×120 delivers 1200 sq ft of rugged single-row horse stall shedrow space. Hobby farmers convert the 10×120 into eight 12-foot shedrow stalls with a 4-foot tack area. Dutch doors face outward along the long sidewall for.

You’re viewing:Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow·Size10×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,350$20,900Save $2,550
or as low as $382/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×120
10×100
smaller
$15,400
10×120
this size
$18,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,200 sq ft enclosed
  • Dutch Doors
  • Insulated Roof
  • Wood Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X120-SINGLE-ROW-HORSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

10 feet wide × 120 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. 10×120 delivers 1200 sq ft of rugged single-row horse stall shedrow space.

9 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room10′ × 120′ · 1,200 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

9 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

9 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 9 horses + tack + feed. Hobby farmers convert the 10×120 into eight 12-foot shedrow stalls with a 4-foot tack area.

💡 Pro tip:Dutch Doors. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×120 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow spec sheet.

Width10′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow.

DAILY USEEveryday single-row horse stall shedrow
Everyday single-row horse stall shedrow
1,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-row horse stall shedrow.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-row horse stall shedrow + seasonal storage
single-row horse stall shedrow + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×120 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow, what makes it different.

1,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$382/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $382/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×120?

1,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 120′ footprint with 1,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $9,600–$14,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×120 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×120 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,400+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow also viewed:

🎯 10×120

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×120

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×120

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×120 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×120

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×120 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×120

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×120

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🏢 10×120

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×120 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×120

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×120 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×120

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×120

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×120 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×120

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×120 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow questions, answered.

How much does a 10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow cost?

A 10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow from Steel and Stud starts at $18,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $382/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-row horse stall shedrow ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow?

Almost always for 1,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-row horse stall shedrow different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $382/month on a 10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow.

What warranty comes with the 10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$18,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel barn with three dutch stall doors, horses looking out, and rooftop cupola

10×120 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal carport with enclosed sides sheltering a blue truck near a mountain lake

10×120 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×120 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover | Steel and Stud, From $19,550

12

10×120 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$22,300$19,550SAVE $2,750
or $407/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×120Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×120 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover packs 1200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Gun clubs and private ranges cover a 100-foot firing line with an.

You’re viewing:Outdoor Shooting Range Cover·Size10×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,550$22,300Save $2,750
or as low as $407/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×120
10×100
smaller
$16,600
10×120
this size
$19,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,200 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Front
  • Low Eave
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X120-OUTDOOR-SHOOTINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your outdoor shooting range cover layout.

10 feet wide × 120 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover packs 1200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE10′ × 120′ · 1,200 sq ft · outdoor shooting range cover layout

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover packs 1200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Gun clubs and private ranges cover a 100-foot firing line with an open-sided 10×120 to keep shooters dry without obstructing target sightlines. The narrow depth puts the roof directly over the bench while leaving downrange visibility wide open.

💡 Pro tip:Low Eave.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×120 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Outdoor Shooting Range Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover spec sheet.

Width10′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Outdoor Shooting Range Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday outdoor shooting range cover
Everyday outdoor shooting range cover
1,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a outdoor shooting range cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWoutdoor shooting range cover + seasonal storage
outdoor shooting range cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×120 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover, what makes it different.

1,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$407/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $407/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×120?

1,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 120′ footprint with 1,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $9,600–$14,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Outdoor Shooting Range Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×120 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×120 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Outdoor Shooting Range Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,400+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Outdoor Shooting Range Cover also viewed:

🎯 10×120

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×120

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×120

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×120 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×120

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×120 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×120

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×120

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×120

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏡 10×120

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×120 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×120

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×120

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×120 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×120

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×120 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover cost?

A 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover from Steel and Stud starts at $19,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $407/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud outdoor shooting range cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover?

Almost always for 1,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud outdoor shooting range cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $407/month on a 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover.

What warranty comes with the 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 10×120 outdoor shooting range cover meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Outdoor Shooting Range Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal carport with enclosed sides sheltering a blue truck near a mountain lake

10×120 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark gray steel building with white roll up door and four side windows in commercial yard

10×120 Property-Line Detached Garage

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×120 Property-Line Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $17,700

12

10×120 Property-Line Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,200$17,700SAVE $2,500
or $369/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×120Property-Line Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×120 Property-Line Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 10×120 property-line detached garage packs 1200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Our 10×120 property-line detached garage fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths.

You’re viewing:Property-Line Detached Garage·Size10×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,700$20,200Save $2,500
or as low as $369/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×120
10×100
smaller
$14,750
10×120
this size
$17,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,200 sq ft enclosed
  • Fully Enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X120-PROPERTY-LINE-DEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

10 feet wide × 120 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 10×120 property-line detached garage packs 1200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

1 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay10′ × 120′ · 1,200 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

1 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

1 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicles + full hobby shop. Our 10×120 property-line detached garage fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

💡 Pro tip:Wainscoting. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×120 Property-Line Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Property-Line Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Property-Line Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Property-Line Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday property-line detached garage
Everyday property-line detached garage
1,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a property-line detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWproperty-line detached garage + seasonal storage
property-line detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×120 Property-Line Detached Garage, what makes it different.

1,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$369/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×120 property-line detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $369/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×120?

1,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 120′ footprint with 1,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $9,600–$14,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Property-Line Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×120 Property-Line Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×120 Property-Line Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Property-Line Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,400+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Property-Line Detached Garage also viewed:

🎯 10×120

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×120

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×120

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×120 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×120

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×120 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×120

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×120

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×120

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×120

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×120 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🌾 10×120

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×120

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×120 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×120

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×120 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Property-Line Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×120 property-line detached garage cost?

A 10×120 property-line detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $17,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $369/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×120 property-line detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud property-line detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×120 property-line detached garage?

Almost always for 1,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud property-line detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×120 property-line detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×120 property-line detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×120 property-line detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $369/month on a 10×120 property-line detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 10×120 property-line detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×120 property-line detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×120 property-line detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×120 property-line detached garage typically adds $9,600–$14,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Property-Line Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$17,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark gray steel building with white roll up door and four side windows in commercial yard

10×120 Property-Line Detached Garage

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Lavender metal building garden shed with french doors, window boxes, and string lights at dawn

10×120 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×120 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench | Steel and Stud, From $18,350

12

10×120 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,900$18,350SAVE $2,550
or $382/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×120Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×120 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench fits 10-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Small-scale growers attach the 10×120 to the long side of a.

You’re viewing:Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench·Size10×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,350$20,900Save $2,550
or as low as $382/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×120
10×100
smaller
$15,400
10×120
this size
$18,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,200 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Ready
  • R-13 Insulation
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X120-GREENHOUSE-HEADHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your greenhouse layout.

10 feet wide × 120 feet long. Our 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench fits 10-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Grow tablesPROPAGATIONHeadhouse / Storage10′ × 120′ · 1,200 sq ft · greenhouse layout

Grow tables · Propagation · Headhouse / Storage

Grow tables at the front, propagation in the middle, headhouse / storage at the rear. Small-scale growers attach the 10×120 to the long side of a greenhouse range as a headhouse, potting benches down one wall, propagation racks down the other.

💡 Pro tip:Lean-To Ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×120 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench spec sheet.

Width10′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench.

DAILY USEEveryday greenhouse headhouse & potting bench
Everyday greenhouse headhouse & potting bench
1,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a greenhouse headhouse & potting bench.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgreenhouse headhouse & potting bench + seasonal storage
greenhouse headhouse & potting bench + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×120 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench, what makes it different.

1,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$382/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $382/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×120?

1,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 120′ footprint with 1,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $9,600–$14,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×120 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×120 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,400+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench also viewed:

🎯 10×120

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×120

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×120

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×120 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×120

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×120 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×120

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×120

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×120

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×120

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×120 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×120

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×120 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🏛️ 10×120

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×120 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×120

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×120 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench questions, answered.

How much does a 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench cost?

A 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench from Steel and Stud starts at $18,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $382/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud greenhouse headhouse & potting bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench?

Almost always for 1,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud greenhouse headhouse & potting bench different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $382/month on a 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench.

What warranty comes with the 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$18,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Lavender metal building garden shed with french doors, window boxes, and string lights at dawn

10×120 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal carport with enclosed sides sheltering a pickup truck in rolling green hills

10×120 Park & Trailhead Pavilion

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×120 Park & Trailhead Pavilion | Steel and Stud, From $19,650

12

10×120 Park & Trailhead Pavilion
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$22,400$19,650SAVE $2,750
or $409/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×120Park & Trailhead Pavilion

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×120 Park & Trailhead Pavilion, engineered to code for assembly use.

10×120 delivers 1200 sq ft of public-use park & trailhead pavilion space. Parks departments and trail associations cover a 100-foot bench line with an open-sided 10×120 for shade and rain shelter at trailheads, beach.

You’re viewing:Park & Trailhead Pavilion·Size10×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,650$22,400Save $2,750
or as low as $409/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×120
10×100
smaller
$16,700
10×120
this size
$19,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,200 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Sides
  • IBC Certified
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X120-PARK-TRAILHEAD-PBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-cover layout.

10 feet wide × 120 feet long. 10×120 delivers 1200 sq ft of public-use park & trailhead pavilion space.

Cover bayPillar zoneAPPROACH APRON10′ × 120′ · 1,200 sq ft · open-cover layout

Cover bay · Pillar zone · Approach apron

Cover bay at the front, pillar zone in the middle, approach apron at the rear. Parks departments and trail associations cover a 100-foot bench line with an open-sided 10×120 for shade and rain shelter at trailheads, beach parking lots, and event staging areas.

💡 Pro tip:IBC Certified.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×120 Park & Trailhead Pavilion in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Park & Trailhead Pavilion.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Park & Trailhead Pavilion spec sheet.

Width10′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Park & Trailhead Pavilion.

DAILY USEEveryday park & trailhead pavilion
Everyday park & trailhead pavilion
1,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a park & trailhead pavilion.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpark & trailhead pavilion + seasonal storage
park & trailhead pavilion + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×120 Park & Trailhead Pavilion, what makes it different.

1,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$409/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×120 park & trailhead pavilion is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $409/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×120?

1,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 120′ footprint with 1,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $9,600–$14,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Park & Trailhead Pavilion shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×120 Park & Trailhead Pavilion buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×120 Park & Trailhead Pavilion

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Park & Trailhead Pavilion · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,400+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Park & Trailhead Pavilion also viewed:

🎯 10×120

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×120

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×120

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×120 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×120

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×120 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×120

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×120

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×120

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×120

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×120 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×120

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×120 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×120

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏭 10×120

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×120 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Park & Trailhead Pavilion questions, answered.

How much does a 10×120 park & trailhead pavilion cost?

A 10×120 park & trailhead pavilion from Steel and Stud starts at $19,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $409/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×120 park & trailhead pavilion price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud park & trailhead pavilion ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×120 park & trailhead pavilion?

Almost always for 1,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud park & trailhead pavilion different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×120 park & trailhead pavilion need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×120 park & trailhead pavilion delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×120 park & trailhead pavilion without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $409/month on a 10×120 park & trailhead pavilion.

What warranty comes with the 10×120 park & trailhead pavilion?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×120 park & trailhead pavilion in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×120 park & trailhead pavilion pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Park & Trailhead Pavilion quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal carport with enclosed sides sheltering a pickup truck in rolling green hills

10×120 Park & Trailhead Pavilion

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel garage with open bay sheltering a silver muscle car beside the house

10×120 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×120 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through | Steel and Stud, From $19,950

12

10×120 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$22,750$19,950SAVE $2,800
or $416/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×120Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×120 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through fits 10-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Detailers and self-service operators cover a 100-foot wash lane with.

You’re viewing:Carwash & Detail Drive-Through·Size10×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,950$22,750Save $2,800
or as low as $416/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×120
10×100
smaller
$17,000
10×120
this size
$19,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,200 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Gables
  • Drive-Through
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X120-CARWASH-DETAIL-DBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your carwash & detail drive-through layout.

10 feet wide × 120 feet long. Our 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through fits 10-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area10′ × 120′ · 1,200 sq ft · carwash & detail drive-through layout

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through layout.

Our 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through fits 10-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Detailers and self-service operators cover a 100-foot wash lane with the 10×120 to keep crews and customers dry. The narrow 10-foot width matches a single bay, and the open-gable configuration lets vehicles pull straight through without backing.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×120 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carwash & Detail Drive-Through.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through spec sheet.

Width10′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carwash & Detail Drive-Through.

DAILY USEEveryday carwash & detail drive-through
Everyday carwash & detail drive-through
1,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carwash & detail drive-through.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarwash & detail drive-through + seasonal storage
carwash & detail drive-through + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×120 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through, what makes it different.

1,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$416/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $416/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×120?

1,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 120′ footprint with 1,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $9,600–$14,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carwash & Detail Drive-Through shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×120 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×120 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carwash & Detail Drive-Through · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,400+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carwash & Detail Drive-Through also viewed:

🎯 10×120

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×120 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×120

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×120 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×120

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×120 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×120

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×120 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×120

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×120 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×120

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×120 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×120

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×120 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×120

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×120 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×120

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×120 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×120

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×120 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×120

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×120 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through questions, answered.

How much does a 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through cost?

A 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through from Steel and Stud starts at $19,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $416/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carwash & detail drive-through ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through?

Almost always for 1,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carwash & detail drive-through different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $416/month on a 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through.

What warranty comes with the 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 10×120 carwash & detail drive-through ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Carwash & Detail Drive-Through quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel garage with open bay sheltering a silver muscle car beside the house

10×120 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

1,200 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×120 steel building delivers 1,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green metal shed studio with single slope roof, tall windows, and black trim

12×16 Backyard Home Office

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×16 Backyard Home Office | Steel and Stud, From $2,850

12

12×16 Backyard Home Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,250$2,850SAVE $400
or $59/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×16Backyard Home Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×16 Backyard Home Office, built for daily backyard use.

12×16 delivers 192 sq ft of everyday backyard home office space. Remote workers convert a 12×16 steel building into an insulated home office for under $10K all-in. R-19 batts in the walls, double-bubble in the roof, a.

You’re viewing:Backyard Home Office·Size12×16·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,850$3,250Save $400
or as low as $59/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×16
12×16
this size
$2,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 192 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • French Door
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X16-BACKYARD-HOME-OFBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your home-office layout.

12 feet wide × 16 feet long. 12×16 delivers 192 sq ft of everyday backyard home office space.

Work zoneMeeting / deskSTORAGE / MECH12′ × 16′ · 192 sq ft · home-office layout

Work zone · Meeting / desk · Storage / Mech

Work zone at the front, meeting / desk in the middle, storage / mech at the rear. Remote workers convert a 12×16 steel building into an insulated home office for under $10K all-in.

💡 Pro tip:Mini-Split Ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×16 Backyard Home Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Home Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
192 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×16 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Home Office spec sheet.

Width12′
Length16′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space192 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Home Office.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard home office
Everyday backyard home office
192 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard home office + seasonal storage
backyard home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×16 Backyard Home Office, what makes it different.

192sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$59/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×16 backyard home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $59/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×16?

192 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 16′ footprint with 192 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,536–$2,304 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Home Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×16 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×16 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×16 Backyard Home Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×16 Backyard Home Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Home Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×17×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$864+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Home Office also viewed:

🏡 12×16

Backyard Storage Shed

12×16 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×16

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×16 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×16

Garden Shed with Windows

12×16 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🎯 12×16

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×16 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×16

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×16 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×16

Bike & Sports Storage

12×16 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×16

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×16 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×16

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×16 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×16

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×16

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×16 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×16

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×16 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Home Office questions, answered.

How much does a 12×16 backyard home office cost?

A 12×16 backyard home office from Steel and Stud starts at $2,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $59/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×16 backyard home office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×16 backyard home office?

Almost always for 192+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard home office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×16 backyard home office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×16 backyard home office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×16 backyard home office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $59/month on a 12×16 backyard home office.

What warranty comes with the 12×16 backyard home office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×16 backyard home office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×16 backyard home office add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×16 backyard home office typically adds $1,536–$2,304 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Home Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green metal shed studio with single slope roof, tall windows, and black trim

12×16 Backyard Home Office

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal shed interior with lawn mowers, ladders, shelving bins and organized tool storage

12×16 Zero-Turn Mower Garage

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×16 Zero-Turn Mower Garage | Steel and Stud, From $2,850

12

12×16 Zero-Turn Mower Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,250$2,850SAVE $400
or $59/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×16Zero-Turn Mower Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×16 Zero-Turn Mower Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×16 zero-turn mower garage? At 192 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Built for homeowners with a John Deere or Cub Cadet zero-turn that’s outgrowing the.

You’re viewing:Zero-Turn Mower Garage·Size12×16·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,850$3,250Save $400
or as low as $59/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×16
12×16
this size
$2,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 192 sq ft enclosed
  • 8×7 Roll-Up
  • Boxed Eave Roof
  • Mower Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X16-ZERO-TURN-MOWER-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your single-car garage.

12 feet wide × 16 feet long. 9-ft roll-up fits full-size truck. Looking for a 12×16 zero-turn mower garage? At 192 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Vehicle bayWorkbench wallStorage shelf12′ × 16′ · 192 sq ft · single-car garage

Vehicle bay · Workbench wall · Storage shelf

Vehicle bay at the front, workbench wall in the middle, storage shelf at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicle + workbench. Built for homeowners with a John Deere or Cub Cadet zero-turn that’s outgrowing the garage.

💡 Pro tip:Mower Clearance. Size affords: workbench, shelving.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×16 Zero-Turn Mower Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Zero-Turn Mower Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
192 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×16 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Zero-Turn Mower Garage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length16′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space192 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Zero-Turn Mower Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday zero-turn mower garage
Everyday zero-turn mower garage
192 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a zero-turn mower garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWzero-turn mower garage + seasonal storage
zero-turn mower garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×16 Zero-Turn Mower Garage, what makes it different.

192sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$59/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×16 zero-turn mower garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $59/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×16?

192 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 16′ footprint with 192 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,536–$2,304 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Zero-Turn Mower Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×16 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×16 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×16 Zero-Turn Mower Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×16 Zero-Turn Mower Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Zero-Turn Mower Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×17×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$864+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Zero-Turn Mower Garage also viewed:

🏡 12×16

Backyard Storage Shed

12×16 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×16

Garden Shed with Windows

12×16 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×16

Backyard Home Office

12×16 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×16

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×16 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×16

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×16 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×16

Bike & Sports Storage

12×16 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×16

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×16 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×16

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×16 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×16

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×16

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×16 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×16

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×16 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Zero-Turn Mower Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×16 zero-turn mower garage cost?

A 12×16 zero-turn mower garage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $59/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×16 zero-turn mower garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud zero-turn mower garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×16 zero-turn mower garage?

Almost always for 192+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud zero-turn mower garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×16 zero-turn mower garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×16 zero-turn mower garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×16 zero-turn mower garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $59/month on a 12×16 zero-turn mower garage.

What warranty comes with the 12×16 zero-turn mower garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×16 zero-turn mower garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×16 zero-turn mower garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×16 zero-turn mower garage typically adds $1,536–$2,304 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Zero-Turn Mower Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal shed interior with lawn mowers, ladders, shelving bins and organized tool storage

12×16 Zero-Turn Mower Garage

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Lavender metal building garden shed with french doors, window boxes, and string lights at dawn

12×16 Garden Shed with Windows

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×16 Garden Shed with Windows | Steel and Stud, From $2,850

12

12×16 Garden Shed with Windows
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,250$2,850SAVE $400
or $59/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×16Garden Shed with Windows

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×16 Garden Shed with Windows, built for daily backyard use.

Our 12×16 garden shed with windows fits 12-foot widths and 16-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Gardeners spec this with two 12×16 windows and a 36-inch walk-in door for.

You’re viewing:Garden Shed with Windows·Size12×16·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,850$3,250Save $400
or as low as $59/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×16
12×16
this size
$2,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 192 sq ft enclosed
  • 2 Windows
  • Walk-In Door
  • Vented Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X16-GARDEN-SHED-WINDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your garden shed with windows layout.

12 feet wide × 16 feet long. Our 12×16 garden shed with windows fits 12-foot widths and 16-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 16′ · 192 sq ft · garden shed with windows layout

Garden Shed with Windows layout.

Our 12×16 garden shed with windows fits 12-foot widths and 16-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Gardeners spec this with two 12×16 windows and a 36-inch walk-in door for potting, seed-starting, and tool storage. The vertical-panel walls handle splash from a hose-down without rotting, and the 10-foot width fits a potting bench plus floor-to-ceiling shelving on the opposite wall.

💡 Pro tip:Vented Gables.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×16 Garden Shed with Windows in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Shed with Windows.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
192 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×16 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Shed with Windows spec sheet.

Width12′
Length16′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space192 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Shed with Windows.

DAILY USEEveryday garden shed with windows
Everyday garden shed with windows
192 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden shed with windows.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden shed with windows + seasonal storage
garden shed with windows + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×16 Garden Shed with Windows, what makes it different.

192sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$59/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×16 garden shed with windows is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $59/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×16?

192 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 16′ footprint with 192 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,536–$2,304 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Shed with Windows shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×16 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×16 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×16 Garden Shed with Windows buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×16 Garden Shed with Windows

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Shed with Windows · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×17×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$864+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Shed with Windows also viewed:

🏡 12×16

Backyard Storage Shed

12×16 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×16

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×16 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×16

Backyard Home Office

12×16 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×16

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×16 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×16

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×16 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×16

Bike & Sports Storage

12×16 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×16

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×16 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×16

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×16 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×16

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×16

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×16 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×16

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×16 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Shed with Windows questions, answered.

How much does a 12×16 garden shed with windows cost?

A 12×16 garden shed with windows from Steel and Stud starts at $2,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $59/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×16 garden shed with windows price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden shed with windows ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×16 garden shed with windows?

Almost always for 192+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden shed with windows different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×16 garden shed with windows need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×16 garden shed with windows delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×16 garden shed with windows without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $59/month on a 12×16 garden shed with windows.

What warranty comes with the 12×16 garden shed with windows?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×16 garden shed with windows in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×16 garden shed with windows add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×16 garden shed with windows typically adds $1,536–$2,304 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Shed with Windows quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Lavender metal building garden shed with french doors, window boxes, and string lights at dawn

12×16 Garden Shed with Windows

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit pool house at twilight with covered porch and lit sliding glass doors

12×16 Pool Equipment & Cabana

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×16 Pool Equipment & Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $2,850

12

12×16 Pool Equipment & Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,250$2,850SAVE $400
or $59/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×16Pool Equipment & Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×16 Pool Equipment & Cabana, built for hobby and recreational use.

12×16 delivers 192 sq ft of hobby-ready pool equipment & cabana space. Pool owners use 192 sq ft to house the pump, filter, heater, and chemicals on one side and changing-room storage on the other. Galvalume panels.

You’re viewing:Pool Equipment & Cabana·Size12×16·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,850$3,250Save $400
or as low as $59/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×16
12×16
this size
$2,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 192 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume Finish
  • Locking Door
  • Chemical-Safe
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X16-POOL-EQUIPMENT-CBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

12 feet wide × 16 feet long. 12×16 delivers 192 sq ft of hobby-ready pool equipment & cabana space.

Main loungeWet bar / Kitch.Bath / Storage12′ × 16′ · 192 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. Pool owners use 192 sq ft to house the pump, filter, heater, and chemicals on one side and changing-room storage on the other.

💡 Pro tip:Chemical-Safe.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×16 Pool Equipment & Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool Equipment & Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
192 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×16 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool Equipment & Cabana spec sheet.

Width12′
Length16′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space192 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool Equipment & Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool equipment & cabana
Everyday pool equipment & cabana
192 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool equipment & cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool equipment & cabana + seasonal storage
pool equipment & cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×16 Pool Equipment & Cabana, what makes it different.

192sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$59/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×16 pool equipment & cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $59/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×16?

192 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 16′ footprint with 192 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,536–$2,304 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool Equipment & Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×16 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×16 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×16 Pool Equipment & Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×16 Pool Equipment & Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool Equipment & Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×17×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$864+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool Equipment & Cabana also viewed:

🏡 12×16

Backyard Storage Shed

12×16 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×16

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×16 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×16

Garden Shed with Windows

12×16 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×16

Backyard Home Office

12×16 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 12×16

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×16 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×16

Bike & Sports Storage

12×16 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×16

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×16 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×16

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×16 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×16

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×16

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×16 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×16

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×16 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool Equipment & Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 12×16 pool equipment & cabana cost?

A 12×16 pool equipment & cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $2,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $59/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×16 pool equipment & cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool equipment & cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×16 pool equipment & cabana?

Almost always for 192+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool equipment & cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×16 pool equipment & cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×16 pool equipment & cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×16 pool equipment & cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $59/month on a 12×16 pool equipment & cabana.

What warranty comes with the 12×16 pool equipment & cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×16 pool equipment & cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×16 pool equipment & cabana for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a pool equipment & cabana to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Pool Equipment & Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit pool house at twilight with covered porch and lit sliding glass doors

12×16 Pool Equipment & Cabana

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure wellness studio in dusty rose with covered workout porch and glass doors

12×16 Workshop & Hobby Room

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×16 Workshop & Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $2,850

12

12×16 Workshop & Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,250$2,850SAVE $400
or $59/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×16Workshop & Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×16 Workshop & Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Our 12×16 workshop & hobby room fits 12-foot widths and 16-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Hobbyists run a 10-foot workbench down the long wall, a 4-foot drill press.

You’re viewing:Workshop & Hobby Room·Size12×16·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,850$3,250Save $400
or as low as $59/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×16
12×16
this size
$2,850
12×30
longer
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 192 sq ft enclosed
  • 9′ Legs
  • 1 Window
  • 14 GA Tubular
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X16-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your compact workshop.

12 feet wide × 16 feet long. Single roll-up + walk-in. Our 12×16 workshop & hobby room fits 12-foot widths and 16-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Workbench wallTOOL STORAGEFloor space12′ × 16′ · 192 sq ft · compact workshop

Workbench wall · Tool storage · Floor space

Workbench wall at the front, tool storage in the middle, floor space at the rear. Capacity: personal workshop. Hobbyists run a 10-foot workbench down the long wall, a 4-foot drill press station on the short wall, and still walk a project around.

💡 Pro tip:14 GA Tubular. Size affords: workbench, pegboard wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×16 Workshop & Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop & Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
192 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×16 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop & Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width12′
Length16′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space192 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop & Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop & hobby room
Everyday workshop & hobby room
192 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop & hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop & hobby room + seasonal storage
workshop & hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×16 Workshop & Hobby Room, what makes it different.

192sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$59/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×16 workshop & hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $59/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×16?

192 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 16′ footprint with 192 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,536–$2,304 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop & Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×16 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×16 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×16 Workshop & Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×16 Workshop & Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop & Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×17×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$864+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop & Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 12×16

Backyard Storage Shed

12×16 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×16

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×16 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×16

Garden Shed with Windows

12×16 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×16

Backyard Home Office

12×16 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×16

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×16 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×16

Bike & Sports Storage

12×16 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×16

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×16 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×16

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×16 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×16

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×16

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×16 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×16

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×16 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop & Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 12×16 workshop & hobby room cost?

A 12×16 workshop & hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $2,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $59/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×16 workshop & hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop & hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×16 workshop & hobby room?

Almost always for 192+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop & hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×16 workshop & hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×16 workshop & hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×16 workshop & hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $59/month on a 12×16 workshop & hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 12×16 workshop & hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×16 workshop & hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×16 workshop & hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×16 workshop & hobby room typically adds $1,536–$2,304 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop & Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure wellness studio in dusty rose with covered workout porch and glass doors

12×16 Workshop & Hobby Room

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Matte black metal garage gym conversion with sliding glass door, treadmills, and squat rack

12×16 Bike & Sports Storage

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×16 Bike & Sports Storage | Steel and Stud, From $2,850

12

12×16 Bike & Sports Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,250$2,850SAVE $400
or $59/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×16Bike & Sports Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×16 Bike & Sports Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×16 bike & sports storage packs 192 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Families with four-plus bikes, kayaks, and sports gear use a 12×16 utility shed to clear.

You’re viewing:Bike & Sports Storage·Size12×16·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,850$3,250Save $400
or as low as $59/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×16
12×16
this size
$2,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 192 sq ft enclosed
  • Double Doors
  • Wall Hooks Ready
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X16-BIKE-SPORTS-STORBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your bike & sports storage layout.

12 feet wide × 16 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×16 bike & sports storage packs 192 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 16′ · 192 sq ft · bike & sports storage layout

Bike & Sports Storage layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×16 bike & sports storage packs 192 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Families with four-plus bikes, kayaks, and sports gear use a 12×16 utility shed to clear the garage. Wall-mounted vertical bike hooks fit eight bikes on one 12-foot wall. The 10-foot depth handles a 9-foot kayak diagonal-stored. A double-door front opening makes haul-in-haul-out painless.

💡 Pro tip:Vertical Roof.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×16 Bike & Sports Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Bike & Sports Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
192 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×16 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Bike & Sports Storage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length16′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space192 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Bike & Sports Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday bike & sports storage
Everyday bike & sports storage
192 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a bike & sports storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbike & sports storage + seasonal storage
bike & sports storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×16 Bike & Sports Storage, what makes it different.

192sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$59/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×16 bike & sports storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $59/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×16?

192 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 16′ footprint with 192 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,536–$2,304 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Bike & Sports Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×16 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×16 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×16 Bike & Sports Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×16 Bike & Sports Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Bike & Sports Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×17×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$864+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Bike & Sports Storage also viewed:

🏡 12×16

Backyard Storage Shed

12×16 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×16

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×16 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×16

Garden Shed with Windows

12×16 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×16

Backyard Home Office

12×16 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×16

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×16 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×16

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×16 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🌾 12×16

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×16 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×16

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×16 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×16

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×16

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×16 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×16

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×16 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Bike & Sports Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×16 bike & sports storage cost?

A 12×16 bike & sports storage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $59/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×16 bike & sports storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud bike & sports storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×16 bike & sports storage?

Almost always for 192+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud bike & sports storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×16 bike & sports storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×16 bike & sports storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×16 bike & sports storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $59/month on a 12×16 bike & sports storage.

What warranty comes with the 12×16 bike & sports storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×16 bike & sports storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×16 bike & sports storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×16 bike & sports storage typically adds $1,536–$2,304 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Bike & Sports Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Matte black metal garage gym conversion with sliding glass door, treadmills, and squat rack

12×16 Bike & Sports Storage

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with wood posts on a fenced grassy pasture

12×16 Chicken Coop Shelter

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×16 Chicken Coop Shelter | Steel and Stud, From $3,500

12

12×16 Chicken Coop Shelter
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,000$3,500SAVE $500
or $73/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×16Chicken Coop Shelter

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×16 Chicken Coop Shelter, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×16 chicken coop shelter packs 192 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Small property owners convert a 12×16 metal building into a predator-proof coop for 15-20 hens. Steel.

You’re viewing:Chicken Coop Shelter·Size12×16·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,500$4,000Save $500
or as low as $73/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×16
12×16
this size
$3,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 192 sq ft enclosed
  • Vented Gables
  • Predator-Proof
  • Galvalume Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X16-CHICKEN-COOP-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your chicken coop shelter layout.

12 feet wide × 16 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×16 chicken coop shelter packs 192 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 16′ · 192 sq ft · chicken coop shelter layout

Chicken Coop Shelter layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×16 chicken coop shelter packs 192 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Small property owners convert a 12×16 metal building into a predator-proof coop for 15-20 hens. Steel framing won’t be chewed by raccoons, and Galvalume walls hose-clean. Add a partial side opening for a covered run, vented gables for summer airflow, and a walk-in door for daily egg collection.

💡 Pro tip:Predator-Proof.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×16 Chicken Coop Shelter in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Chicken Coop Shelter.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
192 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×16 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Chicken Coop Shelter spec sheet.

Width12′
Length16′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space192 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Chicken Coop Shelter.

DAILY USEEveryday chicken coop shelter
Everyday chicken coop shelter
192 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a chicken coop shelter.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchicken coop shelter + seasonal storage
chicken coop shelter + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×16 Chicken Coop Shelter, what makes it different.

192sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$73/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×16 chicken coop shelter is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $73/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×16?

192 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 16′ footprint with 192 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,536–$2,304 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Chicken Coop Shelter shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×16 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×16 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×16 Chicken Coop Shelter buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×16 Chicken Coop Shelter

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Chicken Coop Shelter · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×17×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$864+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Chicken Coop Shelter also viewed:

🏡 12×16

Backyard Storage Shed

12×16 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×16

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×16 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×16

Garden Shed with Windows

12×16 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×16

Backyard Home Office

12×16 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×16

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×16 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×16

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×16 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×16

Bike & Sports Storage

12×16 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×16

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×16 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×16

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×16

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×16 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×16

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×16 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Chicken Coop Shelter questions, answered.

How much does a 12×16 chicken coop shelter cost?

A 12×16 chicken coop shelter from Steel and Stud starts at $3,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $73/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×16 chicken coop shelter price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud chicken coop shelter ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×16 chicken coop shelter?

Almost always for 192+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud chicken coop shelter different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×16 chicken coop shelter need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×16 chicken coop shelter delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×16 chicken coop shelter without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $73/month on a 12×16 chicken coop shelter.

What warranty comes with the 12×16 chicken coop shelter?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×16 chicken coop shelter in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×16 chicken coop shelter stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Chicken Coop Shelter quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with wood posts on a fenced grassy pasture

12×16 Chicken Coop Shelter

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Bright office interior inside a prefab metal building with desk, shelving, and sliding glass wall

12×16 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×16 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed | Steel and Stud, From $3,500

12

12×16 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,000$3,500SAVE $500
or $73/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×16Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×16 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed packs 192 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers store a sub-compact tractor with the bucket dropped, plus a tiller and brush.

You’re viewing:Garden Tractor & Implement Shed·Size12×16·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,500$4,000Save $500
or as low as $73/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×16
12×16
this size
$3,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 192 sq ft enclosed
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 9′ Legs
  • Implement Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X16-GARDEN-TRACTOR-IBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

12 feet wide × 16 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed packs 192 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Tractor bayImplement bayTool rack12′ × 16′ · 192 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

Tractor bay · Implement bay · Tool rack

Tractor bay at the front, implement bay in the middle, tool rack at the rear. Hobby farmers store a sub-compact tractor with the bucket dropped, plus a tiller and brush hog.

💡 Pro tip:Implement Clearance.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×16 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Tractor & Implement Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
192 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×16 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed spec sheet.

Width12′
Length16′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space192 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Tractor & Implement Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday garden tractor & implement shed
Everyday garden tractor & implement shed
192 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden tractor & implement shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden tractor & implement shed + seasonal storage
garden tractor & implement shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×16 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed, what makes it different.

192sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$73/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $73/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×16?

192 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 16′ footprint with 192 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,536–$2,304 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Tractor & Implement Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×16 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×16 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×16 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×16 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Tractor & Implement Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×17×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$864+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Tractor & Implement Shed also viewed:

🏡 12×16

Backyard Storage Shed

12×16 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×16

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×16 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×16

Garden Shed with Windows

12×16 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×16

Backyard Home Office

12×16 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×16

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×16 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×16

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×16 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×16

Bike & Sports Storage

12×16 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×16

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×16 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🎯 12×16

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×16

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×16 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×16

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×16 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed cost?

A 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed from Steel and Stud starts at $3,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $73/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden tractor & implement shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed?

Almost always for 192+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden tractor & implement shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $73/month on a 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed.

What warranty comes with the 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×16 garden tractor & implement shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Tractor & Implement Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Bright office interior inside a prefab metal building with desk, shelving, and sliding glass wall

12×16 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building toy garage at sunset with yellow motorcycle and canoe inside the open bay

12×16 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×16 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage | Steel and Stud, From $2,850

12

12×16 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,250$2,850SAVE $400
or $59/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×16Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×16 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage? At 192 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Riders fit two motorcycles plus gear on one half and a snowmobile or ATV on the.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage·Size12×16·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,850$3,250Save $400
or as low as $59/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×16
12×16
this size
$2,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 192 sq ft enclosed
  • Concrete Anchors
  • Locking Roll-Up
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X16-MOTORCYCLE-SNOWMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your toy-storage layout.

12 feet wide × 16 feet long. Looking for a 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage? At 192 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

ATV / bikesDaily driverTool wall12′ × 16′ · 192 sq ft · toy-storage layout

ATV / bikes · Daily driver · Tool wall

ATV / bikes at the front, daily driver in the middle, tool wall at the rear. Riders fit two motorcycles plus gear on one half and a snowmobile or ATV on the other.

💡 Pro tip:12 GA Upgrade.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×16 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
192 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×16 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length16′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space192 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & snowmobile storage
Everyday motorcycle & snowmobile storage
192 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & snowmobile storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & snowmobile storage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & snowmobile storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×16 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage, what makes it different.

192sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$59/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $59/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×16?

192 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 16′ footprint with 192 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,536–$2,304 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×16 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×16 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×16 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×16 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×17×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$864+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage also viewed:

🏡 12×16

Backyard Storage Shed

12×16 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×16

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×16 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×16

Garden Shed with Windows

12×16 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×16

Backyard Home Office

12×16 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×16

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×16 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×16

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×16 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×16

Bike & Sports Storage

12×16 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×16

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×16 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×16

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×16 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🏡 12×16

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×16 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×16

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×16 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage cost?

A 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $59/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & snowmobile storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage?

Almost always for 192+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & snowmobile storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $59/month on a 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage.

What warranty comes with the 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle & snowmobile storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building toy garage at sunset with yellow motorcycle and canoe inside the open bay

12×16 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray steel building with black roll-up door and orange Kubota tractor on a gravel pad

12×16 Generator & Utility Enclosure

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×16 Generator & Utility Enclosure | Steel and Stud, From $2,850

12

12×16 Generator & Utility Enclosure
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,250$2,850SAVE $400
or $59/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×16Generator & Utility Enclosure

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×16 Generator & Utility Enclosure, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×16 generator & utility enclosure packs 192 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with whole-house generators, well pumps, and battery storage centralize.

You’re viewing:Generator & Utility Enclosure·Size12×16·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,850$3,250Save $400
or as low as $59/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×16
12×16
this size
$2,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 192 sq ft enclosed
  • Louvered Vents
  • NEC Clearance
  • Vented Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X16-GENERATOR-UTILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your generator & utility enclosure layout.

12 feet wide × 16 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×16 generator & utility enclosure packs 192 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 16′ · 192 sq ft · generator & utility enclosure layout

Generator & Utility Enclosure layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×16 generator & utility enclosure packs 192 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with whole-house generators, well pumps, and battery storage centralize utilities in a 12×16 utility shed. Vented gables handle generator exhaust airflow, and the steel frame meets NEC clearance requirements better than a plastic enclosure. Add a walk-in door with louvered intake.

💡 Pro tip:Vented Build.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×16 Generator & Utility Enclosure in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Generator & Utility Enclosure.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
192 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×16 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Generator & Utility Enclosure spec sheet.

Width12′
Length16′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space192 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Generator & Utility Enclosure.

DAILY USEEveryday generator & utility enclosure
Everyday generator & utility enclosure
192 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a generator & utility enclosure.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgenerator & utility enclosure + seasonal storage
generator & utility enclosure + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×16 Generator & Utility Enclosure, what makes it different.

192sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$59/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×16 generator & utility enclosure is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $59/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×16?

192 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 16′ footprint with 192 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,536–$2,304 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Generator & Utility Enclosure shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×16 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×16 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×16 Generator & Utility Enclosure buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×16 Generator & Utility Enclosure

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Generator & Utility Enclosure · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×17×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$864+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Generator & Utility Enclosure also viewed:

🏡 12×16

Backyard Storage Shed

12×16 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×16

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×16 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×16

Garden Shed with Windows

12×16 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×16

Backyard Home Office

12×16 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×16

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×16 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×16

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×16 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×16

Bike & Sports Storage

12×16 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×16

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×16 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×16

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×16 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×16

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🎯 12×16

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×16 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Generator & Utility Enclosure questions, answered.

How much does a 12×16 generator & utility enclosure cost?

A 12×16 generator & utility enclosure from Steel and Stud starts at $2,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $59/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×16 generator & utility enclosure price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud generator & utility enclosure ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×16 generator & utility enclosure?

Almost always for 192+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud generator & utility enclosure different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×16 generator & utility enclosure need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×16 generator & utility enclosure delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×16 generator & utility enclosure without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $59/month on a 12×16 generator & utility enclosure.

What warranty comes with the 12×16 generator & utility enclosure?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×16 generator & utility enclosure in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×16 generator & utility enclosure add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×16 generator & utility enclosure typically adds $1,536–$2,304 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Generator & Utility Enclosure quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray steel building with black roll-up door and orange Kubota tractor on a gravel pad

12×16 Generator & Utility Enclosure

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building home office with glass wall glowing at autumn sunset

12×16 She-Shed / Studio Retreat

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×16 She-Shed / Studio Retreat | Steel and Stud, From $2,850

12

12×16 She-Shed / Studio Retreat
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,250$2,850SAVE $400
or $59/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×16She-Shed / Studio Retreat

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×16 She-Shed / Studio Retreat, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat? At 192 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. A 192 sq ft studio for art, yoga, reading, or escape from the kids. Spec it with two.

You’re viewing:She-Shed / Studio Retreat·Size12×16·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,850$3,250Save $400
or as low as $59/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×16
12×16
this size
$2,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 192 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • French Door
  • 2 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X16-SHE-SHED-STUDIO-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

12 feet wide × 16 feet long. Looking for a 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat? At 192 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Main loungeWet bar / Kitch.Bath / Storage12′ × 16′ · 192 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. A 192 sq ft studio for art, yoga, reading, or escape from the kids.

💡 Pro tip:Studio-Ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×16 She-Shed / Studio Retreat in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She-Shed / Studio Retreat.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
192 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×16 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She-Shed / Studio Retreat spec sheet.

Width12′
Length16′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space192 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She-Shed / Studio Retreat.

DAILY USEEveryday she-shed / studio retreat
Everyday she-shed / studio retreat
192 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she-shed / studio retreat.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe-shed / studio retreat + seasonal storage
she-shed / studio retreat + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×16 She-Shed / Studio Retreat, what makes it different.

192sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$59/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $59/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×16?

192 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 16′ footprint with 192 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,536–$2,304 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She-Shed / Studio Retreat shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×16 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×16 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×16 She-Shed / Studio Retreat buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×16 She-Shed / Studio Retreat

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She-Shed / Studio Retreat · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×17×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$864+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She-Shed / Studio Retreat also viewed:

🏡 12×16

Backyard Storage Shed

12×16 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×16

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×16 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×16

Garden Shed with Windows

12×16 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×16

Backyard Home Office

12×16 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×16

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×16 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×16

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×16 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×16

Bike & Sports Storage

12×16 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×16

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×16 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×16

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×16 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×16

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×16 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×16

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×16 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She-Shed / Studio Retreat questions, answered.

How much does a 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat cost?

A 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat from Steel and Stud starts at $2,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $59/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she-shed / studio retreat ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat?

Almost always for 192+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she-shed / studio retreat different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $59/month on a 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat.

What warranty comes with the 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×16 she-shed / studio retreat for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a she-shed / studio retreat to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your She-Shed / Studio Retreat quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building home office with glass wall glowing at autumn sunset

12×16 She-Shed / Studio Retreat

192 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 16′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×16 steel building delivers 192 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal workshop with two black bay doors and stone wainscot against mountain hills

14×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

448 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×32 steel building delivers 448 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) | Steel and Stud, From $6,600

12

14×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,500$6,600SAVE $900
or $138/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×32Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), built for daily backyard use.

Our 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) fits 14-foot widths and 32-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. 14×32 delivers 448 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car +.

You’re viewing:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)·Size14×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,600$7,500Save $900
or as low as $138/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×32
14×32
this size
$6,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 448 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X32-METAL-GARAGE-ONEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

14 feet wide × 32 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. Our 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) fits 14-foot widths and 32-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools14′ × 32′ · 448 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicles + small workshop. 14×32 delivers 448 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: lift rough-in, air compressor, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
448 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) spec sheet.

Width14′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space448 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

DAILY USEEveryday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
Everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
448 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal garage (one-car + workshop).
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
metal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), what makes it different.

448sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$138/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $138/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×32?

448 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 32′ footprint with 448 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,584–$5,376 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,016+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) also viewed:

🏡 14×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×32

Pool House / Cabana

14×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) questions, answered.

How much does a 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) cost?

A 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) from Steel and Stud starts at $6,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $138/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Almost always for 448+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $138/month on a 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

What warranty comes with the 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) typically adds $3,584–$5,376 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal workshop with two black bay doors and stone wainscot against mountain hills

14×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

448 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×32 steel building delivers 448 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue steel structure open shelter with flat single slope roof in a lakeside meadow

14×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer

448 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×32 steel building delivers 448 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer | Steel and Stud, From $6,600

12

14×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,500$6,600SAVE $900
or $138/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×32Carport for Truck + Trailer

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 14×32 carport for truck + trailer packs 448 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility.

You’re viewing:Carport for Truck + Trailer·Size14×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,600$7,500Save $900
or as low as $138/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×32
14×32
this size
$6,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 448 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 140 MPH Rated
  • Open Sides
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X32-CARPORT-TRUCK-TRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

14 feet wide × 32 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 14×32 carport for truck + trailer packs 448 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools14′ × 32′ · 448 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicles + small workshop. Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility trailer hitched, end to end.

💡 Pro tip:140 MPH Rated. Size affords: lift rough-in, air compressor, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport for Truck + Trailer.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
448 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport for Truck + Trailer spec sheet.

Width14′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space448 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport for Truck + Trailer.

DAILY USEEveryday carport for truck + trailer
Everyday carport for truck + trailer
448 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport for truck + trailer.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
carport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer, what makes it different.

448sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$138/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×32 carport for truck + trailer is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $138/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×32?

448 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 32′ footprint with 448 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,584–$5,376 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport for Truck + Trailer shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport for Truck + Trailer · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,016+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport for Truck + Trailer also viewed:

🏡 14×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🎯 14×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×32

Pool House / Cabana

14×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport for Truck + Trailer questions, answered.

How much does a 14×32 carport for truck + trailer cost?

A 14×32 carport for truck + trailer from Steel and Stud starts at $6,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $138/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×32 carport for truck + trailer price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×32 carport for truck + trailer?

Almost always for 448+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×32 carport for truck + trailer need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×32 carport for truck + trailer delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×32 carport for truck + trailer without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $138/month on a 14×32 carport for truck + trailer.

What warranty comes with the 14×32 carport for truck + trailer?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×32 carport for truck + trailer in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×32 carport for truck + trailer add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×32 carport for truck + trailer typically adds $3,584–$5,376 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport for Truck + Trailer quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue steel structure open shelter with flat single slope roof in a lakeside meadow

14×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer

448 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×32 steel building delivers 448 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

NOT SURE WHICH SIZE? BUILD YOUR METAL GARAGE IN 3D AND SEE YOUR PRICE INSTANTLY

Flexible Payment Options

Finance Your Metal Garage

Three ways to own your enclosed steel garage building. No hidden fees. Balance due only after installation is complete.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Garages Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Garage

An enclosed prefabricated steel garage is the most durable and cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, tools, equipment and personal property. Here is why property owners across 48 states chose Steel and Stud.

🔒

Fully Enclosed Protection

Every metal garage comes with complete enclosure: steel roof panels, wall panels on all four sides, a standard garage door and a walk-in entry door. Your vehicles, tools and stored belongings stay protected from weather, theft and pests year round.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel garage order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees or subcontractor surprises. Confirm your site is level and the crew handles everything else.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. Enclosed garages especially benefit from 12-gauge because walls and doors create higher wind load requirements than open carports.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work with multiple manufacturers and cut out distributor markups. Our prefab steel garages typically cost 40 to 60 percent less than comparable stick-built, wood-frame or concrete block construction for the same footprint and clearance height.

🎨

Full 3D Customization

Use our free 3D building designer to configure every detail of your garage: door placement, window locations, lean-to additions, insulation, wainscot, 12 panel colors for roof, walls and trim, and certification options for your climate zone.

Engineered for Your Climate

All enclosed garage structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 140 MPH wind plus 25 PSF snow certification is available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

Verified Reviews

What Our Customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Garages.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"We are very happy with our carport. Even though there was a delay with the installation due to weather, we are glad we went with Steel and Stud."

RG
Robert G.
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
Common Questions

Metal Garages FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Metal garage prices from Steel and Stud start at $6,775 for a standard 20x30x10 enclosed garage. Two-car garages (24x40) range from $9,135 to $16,500 depending on your state, roof style and gauge. Triple-wide garages (30x30 to 30x40) start around $10,688. All tubular steel garage prices include free delivery and professional installation.

Every tubular steel garage order includes full enclosure (roof, walls, and end panels), one standard garage door, one walk-in door, free delivery to your job site, and professional installation by a certified crew. You can add extra doors, windows, lean-tos, insulation and color upgrades through the 3D designer before ordering.

Yes. You can place garage doors on any wall (front, side, or back entry), add roll-up or sectional doors, include polycarbonate or diamond windows for natural light, choose from 12 panel colors, add lean-tos for covered parking, upgrade to insulated wall and roof panels, and select your preferred frame gauge and certification level.

A garage with lean-to combines a fully enclosed metal garage with an attached open or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. The lean-to provides additional covered area for outdoor parking, equipment storage, or a shaded work area without the cost of full wall enclosure. Lean-tos can be added to the left, right, front, or back of the main building.

A concrete slab is strongly recommended for enclosed metal garages. It provides a level floor surface, prevents moisture intrusion from the ground, and allows secure concrete anchor bolt attachment. Ground and gravel installations are available but better suited for open-sided structures. Contact us before pouring your slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement.

Most standard two-car metal garages (20x30 to 24x40) are assembled in one day by a professional crew. Larger triple-wide garages or structures with attached lean-tos may take up to two days. The lead time from order confirmation to installation date is typically 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location and seasonal demand.

12-gauge galvanized steel frames (2.5mm thick) are recommended for enclosed garages. Fully enclosed buildings handle more wind load and snow weight than open carports, and the thicker 12-gauge framing provides the structural integrity needed for long-term performance. 12-gauge frames also carry a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge (1.9mm) is available at a lower price for moderate climates.

Yes. Our 3D building designer allows you to place garage doors on any wall, including the long side walls. Side-entry garages are popular on narrow lots where the driveway runs parallel to the structure, or when you want the front wall facing the street without a visible garage door opening.

Yes. Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment with a deposit now and balance after install at zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing with competitive rates from $89/mo over 12 to 72 months and a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) as low as $49/mo with no credit check, first month as down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. View all financing options

Choose from 12 standard colors at no additional charge: Barn Red, Beige, Black, Brown, Burgundy, Burnished Slate, Clay, Galvalume, Green, Pewter Gray, Quaker Gray, Rawhide Tan, Royal Blue, Sandstone, Slate Blue, and White. You can select separate colors for the roof, walls, trim, and wainscot through the 3D designer. Color choices do not affect price or lead time.

Permit requirements vary by county and city. Contact your local building department before ordering to confirm setback requirements, maximum building height, and any engineering certification needs. Once plans are submitted, your deposit is non-refundable if a permit is denied for reasons other than the engineered plans themselves.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Garage Sizes, Types and Dimensions Guide

Enclosed metal garage dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Standard garages range from 12 to 24 feet wide, with lengths from 21 to 100 feet in standard increments. Triple-wide garages span 26 to 30 feet for three-car or commercial layouts. Leg height starts at 6 feet and goes up to 30 feet for the tallest structures, with 10 and 12-foot clearance being the most common choices for residential enclosed garages.

Standard garages (20 to 24 feet wide, 20 to 40 feet long) are the most popular category and accommodate two vehicles with room for side storage, a workbench, or wall-mounted tool systems. A 20x30 garage provides roughly 600 square feet of enclosed space, while a 24x40 gives you 960 square feet of fully protected interior. Triple-wide garages (26 to 30 feet wide) are built for three or more vehicles, commercial fleet parking, or combined vehicle storage and workshop layouts.

Garage with lean-to configurations combine an enclosed garage with an attached open-sided or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. This design gives you the security of a locked enclosed garage for your primary vehicles while providing additional covered parking, equipment shelter, or a shaded outdoor workspace at a fraction of the cost of full enclosure.

How Much Does a Metal Garage Cost in 2026?

Metal garage prices in 2026 start at $9,775 for a standard 30x30x10 enclosed garage and go up to $21,000 or more for large triple-wide structures with lean-tos. All tubular steel garage prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation by a certified crew.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider garages carry heavier framing), Length (additional bays add cost proportionally), Leg Height (taller structures need reinforced legs), Roof Style (vertical adds approximately 15% over regular), Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds roughly 12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty), and Lean-To Additions (each lean-to adds roughly 20 to 30 percent to the base price depending on dimensions).

Prices also vary by state due to regional manufacturing and delivery logistics. Coastal and mountain states with higher certification requirements (140 MPH wind, 25 PSF snow load) carry higher base prices. Contact us with your ZIP code for an exact quote that reflects your specific location.

Choosing the Right Metal Garage for Your Property

Selecting the right enclosed steel garage depends on what you plan to store, how much workspace you need, and the physical constraints of your building site. A one-car garage (12 to 18 feet wide) works for a single vehicle, motorcycle collection, or dedicated workshop. A two-car garage (20 to 24 feet wide) is the most versatile option for residential properties, fitting two standard vehicles with room for seasonal storage. A three-car or triple-wide garage (26 to 30 feet wide) serves families with multiple vehicles, commercial operators storing fleet vehicles, or hobbyists who need a large workshop alongside vehicle bays.

Consider your door placement carefully. Front-entry garages with the door on the short wall are standard, but side-entry configurations are ideal for narrow lots, L-shaped driveways, or properties where you want the long wall to face the street for a cleaner appearance. Our 3D designer lets you place doors, windows and lean-tos exactly where you need them before ordering.

Metal Garage Installation: What to Expect

After placing your order and submitting your deposit, the manufacturer assigns a professional installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size, certification requirements, and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level concrete slab (strongly recommended for enclosed garages), clear vehicle access for the delivery truck, and any permits posted or available. The crew typically completes a standard 20x30 or 24x40 garage in one full day. Triple-wide garages and structures with lean-tos may take up to two days.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your garage is installed and you confirm satisfaction. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Need something different? Explore our full range: open Metal Barns from $1,195 for basic vehicle coverage, metal barns for agricultural storage and equestrian use, tall clearance RV covers for motorhomes and fifth-wheels, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and commercial steel buildings for warehouses, retail and industrial applications. Every category includes factory-direct pricing and professional installation on tubular steel orders.

READY TO SECURE YOUR VEHICLES WITH A METAL GARAGE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who trust our durable metal garages. Enjoy factory-direct pricing with free delivery and professional installation on all tubular steel buildings.

View Cart